blob: 01bfd123014979f551dbe8ebfcfa5c4de4271fe2 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000021#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000030#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000032#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000034#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +000037#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000051#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000052#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000053#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000054#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
56#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
Robert Loughercf176742016-12-15 16:17:53 +000057#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000058#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000059#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000060#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000061#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
62#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000064#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000065#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000066#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000067#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000068#include <cassert>
69#include <climits>
70#include <cstddef>
71#include <cstdint>
72#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000073#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000074#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000075#include <utility>
76#include <vector>
77
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000078using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000079using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000080
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000081#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
82
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000083// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
84// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
85// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
86// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000087static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
88 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
89 cl::desc(
90 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
91
92static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
93 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
94 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000095
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000096static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000097 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
98 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000099
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000100static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
101 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
102 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000103
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000104static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
105 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
106 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
107 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
108 "predicated store"));
109
110static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
111 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
112 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
113 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
114
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000115static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
116 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
117 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
118 "executed"));
119
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000120static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
121 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
122 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
123 "speculatively executed instructions"));
124
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000125STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000126STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
127 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
128STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
129 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
130STATISTIC(
131 NumLookupTablesHoles,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000133STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000134STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
135 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000136STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000137
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000138namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000139
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000140// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
141// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
142// cases composing the case group.
143typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000144 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
146// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
147// switch for that PHI.
148typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000150/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
151struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
152 ConstantInt *Value;
153 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000154
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000155 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000156 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
157
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000158 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
159 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
160 return Value < RHS.Value;
161 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000163 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
164};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000165
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000166class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000167 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000168 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000169 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000170 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000171 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000172 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000173 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
174 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000175 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000176 BasicBlock *Pred,
177 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000178 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
179 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000180
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000181 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000182 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000183 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
184 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000185 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000186 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000187 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000188 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000189 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
190 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000191
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000192public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000193 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000194 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000195 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000196 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000197 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000198
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000199 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
200};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000201
202} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000203
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000204/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000205/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000206static bool
207SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000208 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000209 if (SI1 == SI2)
210 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000211
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000212 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
213 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
214 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
215 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
216 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000217
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000218 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
219 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000220 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
221 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
222 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000223 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
224 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000225 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
226 if (FailBlocks)
227 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
228 Fail = true;
229 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000230 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000231
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000232 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000233}
234
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000235/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
236/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
237/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000238static bool
239isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
240 Instruction *Cond,
241 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
242 if (SI1 == SI2)
243 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000244 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
245
246 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000247 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000248 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
249 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
250 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
251 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252 if (!Ci2)
253 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000254 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
255 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
256 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
257 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
258 return false;
259
260 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
261 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000262 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000263 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
264 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
265 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000266 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
267 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000268 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000269 return false;
270 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
271 }
272 return true;
273}
274
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000275/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
276/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
277/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
278/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000279static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
280 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000281 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
282 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000283
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000284 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000285 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000286 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
290/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
291/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000292/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000293static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000294 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000295 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000298}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000300/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
301/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000302/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
303/// which works well enough for us.
304///
305/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000306/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
307/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
308/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
309/// set and true is returned.
310///
311/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
312/// Select whose cost is 2.
313///
314/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
315/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
316/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000317static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000318 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000319 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000320 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
321 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000322 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
323 // so limit the recursion depth.
324 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
325 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
326 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
327 return false;
328
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000329 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000330 if (!I) {
331 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
332 // can be executed unconditionally.
333 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
334 if (C->canTrap())
335 return false;
336 return true;
337 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000338 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000339
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000340 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000341 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000342 if (PBB == BB)
343 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000345 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
346 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000347 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
348 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000349 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000350 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000351
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
353 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000354 if (!AggressiveInsts)
355 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000356
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000357 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000358 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
359 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000360
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000361 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
362 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
363 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000364 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000365 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000366
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000367 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000368
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000369 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
370 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
371 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
372 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
373 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
374 // enabled further IR optimizations.
375 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
376 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000377 return false;
378
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000379 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
380 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000381
382 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
383 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000384 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000385 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
386 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000387 return false;
388 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
389 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000390 return true;
391}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000392
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000393/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000394/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000396 // Normal constant int.
397 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000398 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399 return CI;
400
401 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
402 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404
405 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
406 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
407 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
408
409 // IntToPtr const int.
410 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
411 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
412 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
413 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
414 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
415 return CI;
416 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000417 return cast<ConstantInt>(
418 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000419 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000420 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000421}
422
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000424
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
426/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
427/// structure.
428/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
429/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
430/// representing the different cases for the switch.
431/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
432/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
433/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
434/// fail.
435struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000436 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000437 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
438 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
439 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
440 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000441
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000442 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000443 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
444 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
445 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000446 }
447
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000448 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000449 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000450 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000451 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000452
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000453private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
455 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
456 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000457 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
458 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459 CompValue = NewVal;
460 return (CompValue != nullptr);
461 }
462
463 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
464 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
465 /// match depending on isEQ).
466 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
467 /// against is placed in CompValue.
468 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
469 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000470 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000471 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
472 ICmpInst *ICI;
473 ConstantInt *C;
474 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000475 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000476 return false;
477 }
478
479 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000480 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000481
482 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000483 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000484 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000485 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000486
487 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
488 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
489
490 /*
491 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
492 x : BITVECTOR(64);
493 y : BITVECTOR(64);
494 z : BITVECTOR(64);
495 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
496 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
497 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
498 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000499 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
500 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
501 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 */
503
504 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
505 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
506 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
507 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
508 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
509 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
510 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
511
512 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
513 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
514 //
515 // mask = (1 << z)
516 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
517 //
518 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
519 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
520
521 // Pattern match a special case:
522 /*
523 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
524 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
525 );
526 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000527 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000528 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
529 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000530 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000536 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000537 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
538 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 UsedICmps++;
540 return true;
541 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000542 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000544 // Pattern match a special case:
545 /*
546 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
547 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
548 );
549 */
550 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
551 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
552 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
553 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
554 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
555 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
556 return false;
557
558 Vals.push_back(C);
559 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
560 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
561 UsedICmps++;
562 return true;
563 }
564 }
565
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000566 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000567 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000568 return false;
569
570 UsedICmps++;
571 Vals.push_back(C);
572 return ICI->getOperand(0);
573 }
574
575 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000576 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
577 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578
579 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
580 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
581 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000582 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
583 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
585 }
586
587 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
588 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
589 // x != 0 && x != 1.
590 if (!isEQ)
591 Span = Span.inverse();
592
593 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
594 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
595 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000596 }
597
598 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000599 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000600 return false;
601
602 // Add all values from the range to the set
603 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
604 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000605
606 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000608 }
609
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000610 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
612 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
613 /// vector.
614 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000615 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000616 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
617 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000618
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000619 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
620 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000621 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000622
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000624 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000625 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000626
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000627 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000629
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
631 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
632 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000633 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
634 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
635 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
636 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000637 continue;
638 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000639
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000641 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000642 // Match succeed, continue the loop
643 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000644 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000645
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000646 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
647 // comparison against the same value as the others.
648 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
649 if (!Extra) {
650 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000651 continue;
652 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000653 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
654 CompValue = nullptr;
655 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000656 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000657 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000658};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000659
660} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000661
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000662static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000663 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000664 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
665 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
666 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
667 if (BI->isConditional())
668 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000669 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
670 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000671 }
672
673 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000674 if (Cond)
675 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000676}
677
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000678/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000679/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000680Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000681 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000682 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
683 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
684 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000685 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
686 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
687 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000688 CV = SI->getCondition();
689 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000691 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000692 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000693 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000694 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000695
696 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000698 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
699 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000701 CV = Ptr;
702 }
703 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000704 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000705}
706
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000707/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000708/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
710 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000711 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000712 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000713 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
714 ++i)
715 Cases.push_back(
716 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000717 return SI->getDefaultDest();
718 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000719
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000720 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000721 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000722 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000723 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
724 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000725 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000726}
727
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000728/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000729/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000730static void
731EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
732 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000733 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000734}
735
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000736/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000737static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
738 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000739 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
740
741 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
742 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
743 std::swap(V1, V2);
744
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000745 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000746 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000747 if (V1->size() == 1) {
748 // Just scan V2.
749 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
750 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
751 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
752 return true;
753 }
754
755 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
756 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
757 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
758 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
759 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
760 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
761 return true;
762 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
763 ++i1;
764 else
765 ++i2;
766 }
767 return false;
768}
769
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000770/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
771/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
772/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
773/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
774/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000775bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
776 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000777 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000778 if (!PredVal)
779 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
781 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
782 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000783 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
784 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000785
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000786 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
787 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
788
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000789 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000790 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000791 BasicBlock *PredDef =
792 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
793 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000794
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000795 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000796 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000798 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000799
800 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
801 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
802 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
803 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
804 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
805 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000806 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000807 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000808
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000809 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
810 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
811 // uncond br.
812 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
813 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000814 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000816
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000817 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000819
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000820 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000821 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
822 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000823
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000824 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
825 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000826 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000827
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000828 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
829 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000830 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000831 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
832 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000833
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000834 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000835 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000836
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000837 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
838 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000839 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000840 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
841 if (HasWeight)
842 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
843 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000844 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000845 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
846 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000847 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
848 --i;
849 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000850 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000851 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000852 Weights.pop_back();
853 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000854 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
855 SI->removeCase(i);
856 }
857 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000858 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000859 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000860 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
861 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000862
863 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000864 return true;
865 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000866
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
868 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000869 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000870 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000871 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
872 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000873 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000874 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000875 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
876 }
877 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000878
879 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
880 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000881 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
883 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
884 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
885 break;
886 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000887
888 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000889 if (!TheRealDest)
890 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000891
892 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
893 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000894 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
895 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
896 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000897 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000898 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000899
900 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000901 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000902 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000903
904 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000905 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
906 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000907
908 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
909 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000910}
911
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000912namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000913
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000914/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
915/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
916/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
917struct ConstantIntOrdering {
918 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
919 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
920 }
921};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000922
923} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000924
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000925static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
926 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
927 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
928 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000929 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000930 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000931 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000932}
933
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000934static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000935 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000937 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000938 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
939
940 return false;
941}
942
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000943/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
944/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
945/// metadata.
946static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
947 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000948 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000949 assert(MD);
950 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000951 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000952 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000953 }
954
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000955 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
956 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
957 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000958 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000959 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
960 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
961 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
962 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000963 }
964}
965
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000966/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000967static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000968 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
969 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
970 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
971 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
972 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000973 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000974}
975
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000976/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
977/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000978/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
979/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000980bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
981 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000982 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000983 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000984 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
985 bool Changed = false;
986
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000987 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000988 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000989 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000990
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000991 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
992 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000993 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000994
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000995 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000996 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000997 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
998 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
999 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
1000 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
1001 return false;
1002 }
1003 }
1004
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001005 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001006 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001007 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1008
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001009 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1011
1012 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1013 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1014 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001015 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001017 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1018 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001019 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1020 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1021
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001022 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001023 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001024 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001025 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1026 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1027 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001028 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1029 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1030 // successor's weights
1031 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001032
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001033 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001034 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001035 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001036 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001037 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1038 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1039 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001040 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001041
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001042 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1043 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1044 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001045 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001046 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1047 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1048 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1049 else {
1050 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1051 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001052
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001053 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1054 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001055 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1056 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001057 Weights.pop_back();
1058 }
1059
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001060 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001061 --i;
1062 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001063 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001066 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1067 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1068 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1069 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1070 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001071
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001072 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1073 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001074 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1075 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1076 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1077 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1078 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001079 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1080 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1081 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1082 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001083 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1084 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001085 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001086 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001087
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001088 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1089 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1090 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1091 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1092 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1093 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1094 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1095 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001096 } else {
1097 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1098 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1099 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001100 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1101 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001102 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1103 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1104 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001105
1106 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001107 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1108 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001109 Weights.pop_back();
1110 }
1111
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001112 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1113 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001114 --i;
1115 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001116 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001117
1118 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1119 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001120 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1121 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1122 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001123 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1124 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001125 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1126 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001127 PTIHandled.erase(
1128 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001129 }
1130
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001131 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1132 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001133 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001134 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001135 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1136 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001137 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001138 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001139 }
1140
1141 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1142 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1143 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001144 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1145 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001147 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001148 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001149 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001150 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001151 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001152 }
1153
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001154 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001155 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1156 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001157 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001158 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1159 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001160
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001161 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1162 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1163 FitWeights(Weights);
1164
1165 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1166
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001167 NewSI->setMetadata(
1168 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1169 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001170 }
1171
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001172 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001173
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001174 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1175 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1176 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001177 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001178 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1179 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001180 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001181 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001182 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001183 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1184 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001185 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001186 }
1187 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1188 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001189
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001190 Changed = true;
1191 }
1192 }
1193 return Changed;
1194}
1195
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001196// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1197// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1198// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001199static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1200 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001201 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001202 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001203 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001204 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1205 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1206 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001207 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001208 return false;
1209 }
1210 }
1211 }
1212 return true;
1213}
1214
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001215static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1216
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001217/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1218/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1219/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001220static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001221 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001222 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1223 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1224 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1225 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1226 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001227 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1228 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001229
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001230 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1231 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1232
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001233 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001234 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1235 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1237 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1238 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001239 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001240 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001241 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001242 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001243 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001244 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245 return false;
1246
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001247 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001249 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001250 do {
1251 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1252 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1253 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1254 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001255
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001256 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1257 return Changed;
1258
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001259 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1260 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1261 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001262 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001263 if (!I2->use_empty())
1264 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001265 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001266 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1267 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1268 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1269 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1274 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1275 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001276 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001277
1278 // If the debug loc for I1 and I2 are different, as we are combining them
1279 // into one instruction, we do not want to select debug loc randomly from
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001280 // I1 or I2.
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001281 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1) && I1->getDebugLoc() != I2->getDebugLoc())
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001282 I1->setDebugLoc(
1283 DILocation::getMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc()));
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001284
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001285 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001286 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001287
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001288 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1289 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001290 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1291 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1292 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1293 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1294 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001295 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001296 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001297 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001298 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001299 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001300
1301 return true;
1302
1303HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001304 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1305 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001306 return Changed;
1307
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001308 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001309 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001310 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001311 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1312 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1313 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1314 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1315 continue;
1316
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001317 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1318 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1319 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1320 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001321 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001322
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001323 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001324 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001325 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001326 return Changed;
1327 }
1328 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001329
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001330 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001331 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001332 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001333 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001334 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1335 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001336 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001337 }
1338
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001339 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001340 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1341 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1342 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1343 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001344 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001345 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001346 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001347 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001348 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001349 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1350 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001351 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1352 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001353
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001354 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1355 // that determines the right value.
1356 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001357 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001358 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1359 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1360 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001361
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001362 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1363 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1364 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1365 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001366 }
1367 }
1368
1369 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001370 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1371 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001372
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001373 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001374 return true;
1375}
1376
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001377// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1378// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1379static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1380 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001381 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1382 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1383 return false;
1384
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001385 // Early exit.
1386 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1387 return true;
1388
1389 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1390 default:
1391 return true;
1392 case Instruction::Call:
1393 case Instruction::Invoke:
1394 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1395 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1396 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001397 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1398 return false;
1399
1400 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1401 // correctness.
1402 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1403 return false;
1404
1405 return true;
1406
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001407 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1408 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1409 return OpIdx != 2;
1410 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1411 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1412 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1413 return OpIdx == 0;
1414 case Instruction::Alloca:
1415 return false;
1416 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1417 if (OpIdx == 0)
1418 return true;
1419 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00001420 return It.isSequential();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001421 }
1422}
1423
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001424// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1425// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1426// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1427// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1428// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1429static bool canSinkInstructions(
1430 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1431 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001432 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1433 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1434 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1435 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1436 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1437 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1438 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1439 return false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001440 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1441 // have no uses.
1442 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1443 return false;
1444 }
1445
1446 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1447 for (auto *I : Insts)
1448 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1449 return false;
1450
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001451 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1452 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1453 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1454 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001455 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1456 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001457 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1458 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001459 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001460 return (PNUse &&
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001461 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001462 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1463 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001464 }))
1465 return false;
1466 }
1467
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001468 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1469 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1470 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1471 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001472
1473 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1474 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1475 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1476 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1477 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1478 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1479 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1480 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1481 if (OI == 1 && isa<StoreInst>(I0) &&
1482 any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1483 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1484 }))
1485 return false;
1486 if (OI == 0 && isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1487 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1488 }))
1489 return false;
1490
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001491 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001492 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1493 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001494 };
1495 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1496 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1497 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1498 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001499 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1500 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001501 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1502 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001503 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001504 for (auto *I : Insts)
1505 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001506 }
1507 }
1508 return true;
1509}
1510
1511// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1512// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1513// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001514static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001515 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1516
1517 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1518 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1519 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001520 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1521 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1522 do {
1523 I = I->getPrevNode();
1524 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1525 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1526 Insts.push_back(I);
1527 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001528
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001529 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1530 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1531 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1532 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001533 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001534 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1535 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1536 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1537 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1538 return U == PNUse;
1539 }))
1540 return false;
1541 }
1542
1543 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1544 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001545 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1546 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1547 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1548 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1549 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1550 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1551 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1552 // small mess we may make.
1553 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1554 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1555 });
1556 if (!NeedPHI) {
1557 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1558 continue;
1559 }
1560
1561 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1562 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1563 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1564 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1565 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1566 for (auto *I : Insts)
1567 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1568 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1569 }
1570
1571 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1572 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1573 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1574 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1575 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1576
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001577 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations of
1578 // all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location of the
1579 // "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the loop below.
Robert Lougher6717a6f2017-01-12 18:33:49 +00001580 const DILocation *Loc = I0->getDebugLoc();
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001581
1582 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001583 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001584 if (I != I0) {
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001585 Loc = DILocation::getMergedLocation(Loc, I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001586 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001587 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1588 }
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001589 if (!isa<CallInst>(I0))
1590 I0->setDebugLoc(Loc);
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001591
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001592 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1593 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1594 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1595 // instruction and nuke it.
1596 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1597 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1598 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1599 PN->eraseFromParent();
1600 }
1601
1602 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1603 for (auto *I : Insts)
1604 if (I != I0)
1605 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001606
1607 return true;
1608}
1609
1610namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001611
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001612 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1613 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1614 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1615 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1616 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1617 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1618 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1619 // ...
1620 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1621 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1622 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1623 bool Fail;
1624 public:
1625 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1626 Blocks(Blocks) {
1627 reset();
1628 }
1629
1630 void reset() {
1631 Fail = false;
1632 Insts.clear();
1633 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001634 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1635 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1636 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1637 if (!Inst) {
1638 // Block wasn't big enough.
1639 Fail = true;
1640 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001641 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001642 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001643 }
1644 }
1645
1646 bool isValid() const {
1647 return !Fail;
1648 }
1649
1650 void operator -- () {
1651 if (Fail)
1652 return;
1653 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001654 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1655 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001656 // Already at beginning of block.
1657 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001658 Fail = true;
1659 return;
1660 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001661 }
1662 }
1663
1664 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1665 return Insts;
1666 }
1667 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001668
1669} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001671/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001672/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1673/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1674/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1675static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1676 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001677 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1678
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001679 // We support two situations:
1680 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1681 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1682 //
1683 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1684 // else-if patterns;
1685 //
1686 // if (a) f(1);
1687 // else if (b) f(2);
1688 //
1689 // produces:
1690 //
1691 // [if]
1692 // / \
1693 // [f(1)] [if]
1694 // | | \
1695 // | | \
1696 // | [f(2)]|
1697 // \ | /
1698 // [ end ]
1699 //
1700 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1701 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1702 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1703 //
1704 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1705 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1706 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1707 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1708 //
1709 // [if]
1710 // / \
1711 // [x(1)] [if]
1712 // | | \
1713 // | | \
1714 // | [x(2)] |
1715 // \ / |
1716 // [sink.split] |
1717 // \ /
1718 // [ end ]
1719 //
1720 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1721 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1722 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1723 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1724 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1725 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1726 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1727 Cond = T;
1728 else
1729 return false;
1730 }
1731 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001732 return false;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001733
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001734 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001735 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1736 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1737 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1738 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1739 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1740 // PHIOperands.
1741 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1742 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1743 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001744 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001745 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1746 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1747 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1748 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1749 ++ScanIdx;
1750 --LRI;
1751 }
1752
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001753 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001754 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1755 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1756 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1757 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1758 ++NumPHIdValues;
1759 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1760 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1761 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1762 NumPHIInsts++;
1763
1764 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1765 };
1766
1767 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001768 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1769 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1770 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1771 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1772 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1773 LRI.reset();
1774 unsigned Idx = 0;
1775 bool Profitable = false;
1776 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1777 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1778 Profitable = true;
1779 break;
1780 }
1781 --LRI;
1782 ++Idx;
1783 }
1784 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001785 return false;
1786
1787 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1788 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1789 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1790 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1791 ".sink.split"))
1792 // Edges couldn't be split.
1793 return false;
1794 Changed = true;
1795 }
1796
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001797 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1798 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1799 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1800 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1801 // per sunk instruction).
1802 //
1803 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1804 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1805 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1806 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1807 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1808 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1809 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1810 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001811 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001812 << "\n");
1813
1814 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1815 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001816 LRI.reset();
1817 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001818 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001819 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001820 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001821 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001822
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001823 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001824 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001825 NumSinkCommons++;
1826 Changed = true;
1827 }
1828 return Changed;
1829}
1830
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001831/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1832/// conditional block.
1833///
1834/// We are looking for code like the following:
1835/// BrBB:
1836/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1837/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1838/// ... // function).
1839/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1840/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1841/// ThenBB:
1842/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1843/// br label EndBB
1844/// EndBB:
1845/// ...
1846/// We are going to transform this into:
1847/// BrBB:
1848/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1849/// ... //
1850/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1851/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1852/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1853/// ...
1854///
1855/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1856/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001857static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1858 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001859 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1860 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001861 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001862
1863 // Volatile or atomic.
1864 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001865 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001866
1867 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1868
1869 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001870 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001871 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1872 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1873 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001874 // Skip debug info.
1875 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1876 continue;
1877 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001878
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001879 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001880 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001881 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001882
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001883 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1884 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1885 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1886 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1887 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001888 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001889 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001890 }
1891
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001892 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001893}
1894
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001895/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001896///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001897/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1898/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1899/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1900/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1901/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1902///
1903/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1904/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1905/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1906/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1907///
1908///
1909/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1910/// \code
1911/// BB:
1912/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1913/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1914/// ThenBB:
1915/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001916/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001917/// EndBB:
1918/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1919/// ...
1920/// \endcode
1921///
1922/// Into this IR:
1923/// \code
1924/// BB:
1925/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1926/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1927/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1928/// ...
1929/// \endcode
1930///
1931/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001932static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001933 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001934 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1935 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1936 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1937 return false;
1938
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001939 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1940 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1941
1942 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1943 // to swap the select operands later.
1944 bool Invert = false;
1945 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1946 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1947 Invert = true;
1948 }
1949 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1950
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001951 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1952 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1953 // - They are defined in BB, and
1954 // - They have no side effects, and
1955 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1956 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1957
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001958 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001959 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1960 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001961 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001962 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001963 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001964 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001965 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001966 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1967 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001968
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001969 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001970 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001971 ++SpeculationCost;
1972 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001973 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001974
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001975 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001976 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1977 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1978 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001979 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001980 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001981 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1982 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001983 return false;
1984
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001985 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1986 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1987 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1988
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001989 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001990 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001991 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001992 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001993 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001994 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001995 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1996
1997 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001998 }
1999 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002000
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002001 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
2002 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2003 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002004 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2005 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2006 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002007 I != E; ++I)
2008 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002009 ++SpeculationCost;
2010 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002011 return false;
2012 }
2013
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002014 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2015 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002016 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002017 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002018 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2019 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002020
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002021 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002022 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002023 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002024 continue;
2025
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002026 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2027 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2028 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2029 return false;
2030
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002031 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002032 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2033 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2034 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002035 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2036
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002037 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2038 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002039 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002040 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2041 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002042 unsigned MaxCost =
2043 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002044 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002045 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002046
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002047 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2048 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2049 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002050 // constant expression.
2051 ++SpeculationCost;
2052 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002053 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002054 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002055
2056 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2057 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002058 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002059 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002060
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002061 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002062 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002063
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002064 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2065 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002066 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002067 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2068 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2069 if (Invert)
2070 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002071 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2072 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002073 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
2074 }
2075
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002076 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2077 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002078 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002079 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2080
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002081 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002082 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2083 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002084
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002085 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002086 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002087 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2088 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2089 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2090 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2091 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2092 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2093
2094 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2095 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2096 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002097
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002098 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002099 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2100 // destinations were inverted.
2101 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002102 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002103 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002104 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2105 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002106 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2107 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002108 }
2109
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002110 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002111 return true;
2112}
2113
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002114/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002115static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2116 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002117 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002118
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002119 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002120 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2121 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002122 if (Size > 10)
2123 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002124 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002125
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002126 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002127 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002128 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2129 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002130 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2131 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002132 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002133
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002134 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2135 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002136
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002137 return true;
2138}
2139
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002140/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2141/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2142/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002143static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002144 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2145 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002146 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2147 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002148 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2149 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002150
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002151 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2152 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002153 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002154 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002155 }
2156
2157 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002158 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2159 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002160
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002161 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002162 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002163 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2164 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2165 }))
2166 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002167
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002168 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2169 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002170 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002171 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002172 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2173 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002175 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2176 // branch to RealDest.
2177 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2178 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002180 if (RealDest == BB)
2181 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002182 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002183 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2184 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002185
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002186 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2187 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2188 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2189 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002190 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2191 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2192 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002193 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002194
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002195 // Update PHI nodes.
2196 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002197
2198 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2199 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2200 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2201 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002202 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2204 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2205 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2206 continue;
2207 }
2208 // Clone the instruction.
2209 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002210 if (BBI->hasName())
2211 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002212
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002213 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002214 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2215 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002216 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2217 *i = PI->second;
2218 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002220 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002221 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002222 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2223 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2224 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2225 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2226 N = nullptr;
2227 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002228 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002229 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002230 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002231 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002232 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2233 if (N)
2234 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002235 }
2236
2237 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2238 // to EdgeBB instead.
2239 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2240 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2241 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2242 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2243 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2244 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002245
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002246 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002247 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002248 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002249
2250 return false;
2251}
2252
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002253/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2254/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002255static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2256 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002257 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2258 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2259 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2260 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2261 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2262 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002263 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2264 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2265 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002266 if (!IfCond ||
2267 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2268 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2269 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002270
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002271 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2272 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2273 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2274 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2275 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2276 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2277 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2278 if (NumPhis > 2)
2279 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002280
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002281 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2282 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2283 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002284 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002285 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2286 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002287 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2288 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002289
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002290 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2291 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002292 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002293 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002294 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002295 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002296 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002297
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002298 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002299 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002300 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002301 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002302 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002303 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002304
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002305 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002306 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2307 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002308 if (!PN)
2309 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002310
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002311 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2312 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2313 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2314 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2315 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2316 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2317 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002318
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002319 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2320 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2321 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2322 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002323 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002324 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2325 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2326 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002327 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002328 } else {
2329 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002330 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2331 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002332 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002333 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002334 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2335 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002336 return false;
2337 }
2338 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002339
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002340 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002341 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002342 } else {
2343 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002344 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2345 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002346 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002347 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002348 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2349 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002350 return false;
2351 }
2352 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002353
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002354 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002355 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002356
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002357 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2358 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002359 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002360 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002361
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002362 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2363 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002364 if (IfBlock1) {
2365 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2366 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002367 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002368 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002369 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002370 }
2371 if (IfBlock2) {
2372 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2373 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002374 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002375 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002376 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002377 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002378
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002379 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2380 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002381 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002382 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002383
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002384 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2385 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2386 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002387 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002388 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002389
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002390 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2391 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2392 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2393 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002394 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2395 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002396 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002397 return true;
2398}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002399
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002400/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2401/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002402/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002403static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002404 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002405 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2406 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2407 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2408 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2409 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002410
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002411 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2412 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2413 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002414 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002415 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002416 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002417 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002418
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002419 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002420 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2421 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2422 // branch into a return.
2423 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2424 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2425 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002426 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002427 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002428 return true;
2429 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002430
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002431 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2432 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2433 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2434 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002435
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002436 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2437 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2438 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2439 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2440 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2441 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2442 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002443
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002444 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2445 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2446 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2447 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2448 // safe.
2449 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2450 if (TCV->canTrap())
2451 return false;
2452 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2453 if (FCV->canTrap())
2454 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002455
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002456 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2457 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2458 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2459 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002460
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002461 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2462 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002463 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002464 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002465 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2466 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2467 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2468 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002469 TrueValue =
2470 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002471 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002472 }
2473
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002474 Value *RI =
2475 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002476
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002477 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002478
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002479 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002480 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002481 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002482
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002483 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2484
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002485 return true;
2486}
2487
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002488/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002489/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002490static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002491 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2492 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002493 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2494 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002495 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2496 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2497 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2498 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2499 return true;
2500 }
2501 }
2502 return false;
2503}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002504
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002505/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2506/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2507/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2508static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2509 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2510 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2511 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2512 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2513 bool PredHasWeights =
2514 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2515 bool SuccHasWeights =
2516 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2517 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2518 if (!PredHasWeights)
2519 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2520 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2521 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2522 return true;
2523 } else {
2524 return false;
2525 }
2526}
2527
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002528/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2529/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2530/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002531bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002532 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002533
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002534 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002535 if (BI->isConditional())
2536 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2537 else {
2538 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2539 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2540 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2541 // predecessor.
2542 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2543 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2544 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2545 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2546 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002547 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002548 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002549 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2550 Cond = Curr;
2551 break;
2552 }
2553 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2554 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2555 return false;
2556 }
2557 }
2558
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002559 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002560 return false;
2561 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002562
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002563 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2564 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002565 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002566
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002567 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002568 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002569
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002570 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002571 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2572 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002573
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002574 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002575 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002576
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002577 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2578 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2579 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2580 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2581 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2582 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002583 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002584 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2585 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2586 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002587 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002588 return false;
2589 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2590 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2591 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2592 return false;
2593 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2594 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2595 // and Cond.
2596 ++NumBonusInsts;
2597 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2598 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2599 return false;
2600 }
2601
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002602 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2603 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2604 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2605 if (CE->canTrap())
2606 return false;
2607 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2608 if (CE->canTrap())
2609 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002610
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002611 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002612 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002613 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002614 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2615 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002616
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002617 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2618 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002619 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002620
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002621 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2622 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2623 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002624 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002625 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002626 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002627 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2628 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002629 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002630
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002631 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002632 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002633 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002634
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002635 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002636 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002637 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002638 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002639 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002640 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2641 Opc = Instruction::And;
2642 InvertPredCond = true;
2643 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2644 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2645 InvertPredCond = true;
2646 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002647 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002648 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002649 } else {
2650 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2651 continue;
2652 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002653
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002654 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002655 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002656
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002657 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2658 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002659 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002660
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002661 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2662 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2663 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2664 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002665 NewCond =
2666 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002667 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002668
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002669 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002670 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002671 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002672
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002673 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002674 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002675 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2676 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2677 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002678 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002679 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002680 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002681 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2682 continue;
2683 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2684 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002685 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002686 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002687
2688 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2689 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2690 // only given the branch precondition.
2691 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2692 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002693 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002694
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002695 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2696 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002697 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002698 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002699
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002700 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2701 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002702 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002703 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002704 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002705 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002706 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002707 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002708
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002709 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002710 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2711 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002712 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2713
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002714 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002715 bool HasWeights =
2716 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2717 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002718 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2719
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002720 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002721 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002722 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2723 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002724 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002725 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002726 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002727 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2728 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2729 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002730 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2731 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2732 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002733 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002734 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2735 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2736 }
2737 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002738 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002739 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2740 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002741 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002742 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002743 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2744 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2745 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2746 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002747 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2748 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002749 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2750 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2751 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002752 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2753 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2754 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2755
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002756 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2757 NewWeights.end());
2758 PBI->setMetadata(
2759 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2760 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002761 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002762 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002763 } else {
2764 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2765 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002766 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002767 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002768 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002769 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002770 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2771 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2772 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2773 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002774 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2775 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2776 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2777 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002778 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002779 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2780 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002781 } else {
2782 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2783 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2784 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002785 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2786 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002787 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002788 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2789 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2790 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2791 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002792 }
2793 }
2794 // Update PHI Node.
2795 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2796 MergedCond);
2797 }
2798 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2799 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2800 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2801 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002802 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002803
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002804 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2805 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2806 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2807 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2808
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002809 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2810 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2811
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002812 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002813 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2814 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2815 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002816
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002817 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002818 }
2819 return false;
2820}
2821
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002822// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2823// nullptr.
2824static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2825 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2826 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2827 if (!BB)
2828 continue;
2829 for (auto &I : *BB)
2830 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2831 if (S)
2832 // Multiple stores seen.
2833 return nullptr;
2834 else
2835 S = SI;
2836 }
2837 }
2838 return S;
2839}
2840
2841static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2842 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2843 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2844 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2845 //
2846 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2847 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2848 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2849 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2850 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2851 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2852 // one.
2853 //
2854 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2855 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2856 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2857 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2858 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002859
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002860 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2861 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2862 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2863 if (!AlternativeV)
2864 break;
2865
2866 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2867 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2868 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2869 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2870 break;
2871 PHI = nullptr;
2872 }
2873 if (PHI)
2874 return PHI;
2875
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002876 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2877 if (!AlternativeV &&
2878 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2879 return V;
2880
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002881 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002882 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2883 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2884 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002885 PHI->addIncoming(
2886 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002887 return PHI;
2888}
2889
2890static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2891 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2892 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2893 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2894 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2895 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2896 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2897 };
2898
2899 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2900 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2901 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2902 if (!BB)
2903 return true;
2904 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2905 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2906 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002907 unsigned N = 0;
2908 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2909 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2910 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2911 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2912 ++N;
2913 // Free instructions.
2914 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2915 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2916 continue;
2917 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002918 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002919 }
2920 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002921 };
2922
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002923 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2924 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2925 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002926 return false;
2927
2928 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2929 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2930 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2931 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2932 // testing.
2933 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2934 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2935 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2936 return false;
2937
2938 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2939 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2940 return false;
2941
2942 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2943 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2944 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2945 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2946 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2947 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2948 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2949 //
2950 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2951 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2952 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2953 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2954 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2955 return false;
2956 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2957 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2958 return false;
2959 if (QTB)
2960 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2961 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2962 return false;
2963 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2964 I != E; ++I)
2965 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2966 return false;
2967
2968 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2969 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2970 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2971 ->getCondition();
2972 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2973 ->getCondition();
2974
2975 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2976 PStore->getParent());
2977 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2978 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2979
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002980 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2981
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002982 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2983 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2984
2985 if (InvertPCond)
2986 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2987 if (InvertQCond)
2988 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2989 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2990
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002991 auto *T =
2992 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002993 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2994 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2995 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2996 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2997 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2998 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2999
3000 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3001 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003002
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003003 return true;
3004}
3005
3006static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
3007 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3008 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3009 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3010 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3011 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3012 // PBI and QBI.
3013 //
3014 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3015 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3016 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3017 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3018 //
3019 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3020 //
3021 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3022 // / \ | \
3023 // PTB PFB | PFB
3024 // \ / | /
3025 // QBI QBI
3026 // / \ | \
3027 // QTB QFB | QFB
3028 // \ / | /
3029 // PostBB PostBB
3030 //
3031 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3032 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3033 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003034 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003035 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3036 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3037 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3038 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3039 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3040
3041 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3042 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3043 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3044 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3045 InvertPCond = true;
3046 }
3047 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3048 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3049 InvertQCond = true;
3050 }
3051
3052 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3053 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3054 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3055 PTB = nullptr;
3056 if (QTB == PostBB)
3057 QTB = nullptr;
3058
3059 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3060 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3061 // predecessor.
3062 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003063 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003064 };
3065 if (!PostBB ||
3066 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3067 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3068 return false;
3069 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3070 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3071 return false;
3072 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
3073 return false;
3074
3075 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3076 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003077 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003078 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3079 if (!BB)
3080 continue;
3081 for (auto &I : *BB)
3082 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3083 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3084 }
3085 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3086 if (!BB)
3087 continue;
3088 for (auto &I : *BB)
3089 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3090 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3091 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003092
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003093 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3094 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3095 // clear what it contains.
3096 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3097
3098 bool Changed = false;
3099 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3100 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3101 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3102 return Changed;
3103}
3104
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003105/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3106/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003107/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3108/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003109static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3110 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003111 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3112 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003113
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003114 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003115 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003116 // this conditional branch redundant.
3117 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3118 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3119 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3120 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3121 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3122 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3123 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003124 BI->setCondition(
3125 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3126 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003127 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003128
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003129 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3130 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3131 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3132 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003133 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003134 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3135 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3136 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003137 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3138 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3139 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003140 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003141 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003142 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3143 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003144 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3145 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003146 NewPN->addIncoming(
3147 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3148 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003149 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003150 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003151 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003152 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003153
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003154 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003155 return true;
3156 }
3157 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003158
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003159 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3160 if (CE->canTrap())
3161 return false;
3162
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003163 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3164 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3165 // merged store at the end.
3166 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3167 return true;
3168
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003169 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003170 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003171 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003172 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3173 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3174 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3175 ++BBI;
3176 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003177 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003178
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003179 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003180 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3181 PBIOp = 0;
3182 BIOp = 0;
3183 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3184 PBIOp = 0;
3185 BIOp = 1;
3186 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3187 PBIOp = 1;
3188 BIOp = 0;
3189 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3190 PBIOp = 1;
3191 BIOp = 1;
3192 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003193 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003194 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003195
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003196 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3197 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3198 // keep getting unwound.
3199 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3200 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003201
3202 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003203 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3204 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003205
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003206 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3207 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3208 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3209
3210 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003211 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003212 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3213 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003214 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3215 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003216
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003217 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3218 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3219 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3220 if (CE->canTrap())
3221 return false;
3222
3223 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3224 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3225 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3226 if (CE->canTrap())
3227 return false;
3228 }
3229
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003230 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003231 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003232
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003233 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003234 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003235
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003236 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3237 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3238 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3239 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3240 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3241 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3242 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3243 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3244 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3245 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003246 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3247 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003248 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3249 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003250 }
3251
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003252 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003253
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003254 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3255 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003256
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003257 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3258 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003259 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003260 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003261 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003262
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003263 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3264 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003265 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003266
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003267 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003268 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003269
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003270 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3271 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3272 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3273 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003274
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003275 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3276 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003277 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003278 bool HasWeights =
3279 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3280 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003281 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003282 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3283 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3284 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3285 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003286 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3287 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3288 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003289 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3290 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3291 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003292 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003293 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3294
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003295 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003296 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3297 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003298 }
3299
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003300 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3301 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003302 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003303
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003304 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3305 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3306 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3307 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003308 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003309 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3310 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3311 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3312 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3313 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3314 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3315 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003316 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3317 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003318 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003319 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3320 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3321 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3322 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003323 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003324 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3325 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3326 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3327 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3328 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3329 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3330 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3331 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3332
3333 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3334
3335 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3336 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3337 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3338 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003339 }
3340 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003341
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003342 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3343 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003344
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003345 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3346 // one fewer predecessor.
3347 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003348}
3349
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003350// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3351// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003352// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3353// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3354// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3355static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003356 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3357 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003358 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003359 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3360 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3361 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3362 // successor.
3363 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003364 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003365
3366 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003367 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003368 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3369 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003370 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003371 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003372 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003373 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003374 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3375 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003376 }
3377
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003378 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3379 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3380
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003381 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003382 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003383 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3384 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3385 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003386 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003387 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003388 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3389 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003390 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3391 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3392 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003393 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3394 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003395 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003396 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3397 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3398 // terminator must be unreachable.
3399 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3400 } else {
3401 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3402 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3403 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003404 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003405 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003406 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003407 else
3408 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003409 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003410 }
3411
3412 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3413 return true;
3414}
3415
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003416// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003417// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3418// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3419// unconditional otherwise.
3420static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3421 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3422 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3423 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3424 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3425 return false;
3426
3427 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3428 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003429 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3430 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003431
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003432 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3433 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3434 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3435 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3436 if (HasWeights) {
3437 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3438 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003439 TrueWeight =
3440 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3441 FalseWeight =
3442 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003443 }
3444 }
3445
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003446 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003447 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3448 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003449}
3450
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003451// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003452// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3453// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3454// with
3455// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3456static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3457 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3458 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3459 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3460 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3461 return false;
3462
3463 // Extract the actual blocks.
3464 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3465 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3466
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003467 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003468 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3469 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003470}
3471
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003472/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3473/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003474/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3475/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3476/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3477/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3478/// like:
3479///
3480/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3481/// DEFAULT:
3482/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3483/// br label %end
3484/// end:
3485/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003486///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003487/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3488/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003489static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003490 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003491 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3492 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003493 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003494
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003495 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3496 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003497 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3498 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003499
3500 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3501 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003502
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003503 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3504 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3505 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3506 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003507 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3508 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003509
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003510 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3511 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3512 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003513
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003514 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3515 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3516 // away.
3517 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3518 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3519 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3520 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003521
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003522 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003523 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003524 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3525 }
3526 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003527 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003528 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003529
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003530 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3531 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3532 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003533 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003534 Value *V;
3535 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3536 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3537 else
3538 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003539
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003540 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3541 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3542 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003543 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003544 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003545
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003546 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3547 // the block.
3548 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003549 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003550 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003551 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3552 return false;
3553
3554 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3555 // true in the PHI.
3556 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003557 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003558
3559 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3560 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3561
3562 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3563 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3564 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3565 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3566
3567 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3568 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003569 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3570 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003571 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3572 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3573 if (HasWeights) {
3574 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3575 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3576 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003577 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003578 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3579
3580 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003581 SI->setMetadata(
3582 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3583 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003584 }
3585 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003586 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003587
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003588 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003589 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3590 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3591 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003592 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3593 return true;
3594}
3595
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003596/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003597/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3598/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003599static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3600 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003601 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003602 if (!Cond)
3603 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003604
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003605 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3606 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3607 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003608
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003609 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003610 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3611 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003612 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003613 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3614 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3615 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003616
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003617 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003618 if (!CompVal)
3619 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003620
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003621 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3622 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3623 return false;
3624
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003625 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3626
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003627 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3628 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3629 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3630 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003631
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003632 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003633 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003634 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3635 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003636
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003637 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3638 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3639
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003640 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3641 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003642 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3643 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3644 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003645
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003646 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003647
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003648 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003649 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3650 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003651
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003652 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3653 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3654 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3655 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003656 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3657 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003658 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3659 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003660 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3661
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003662 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003663 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003664 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003665 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003666
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003667 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003668
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003669 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3670 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003671 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003672
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003673 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003674 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003675 BB = NewBB;
3676 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003677
3678 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003679 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3680 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003681 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3682 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003683 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003684
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003685 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003686 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003687
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003688 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3689 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3690 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003691
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003692 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3693 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3694 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003695 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003696 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3697 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003698 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003699 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3700 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003701
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003702 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3703 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003704
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003705 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003706 return true;
3707}
3708
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003709bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003710 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3711 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3712 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3713 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3714 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3715 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003716
3717 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003718}
3719
3720// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3721bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3722 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3723
3724 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3725 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3726 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003727 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003728 while (++I != E)
3729 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3730 return false;
3731
3732 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3733 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3734
3735 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003736 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3737 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003738 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3739 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3740
3741 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3742 // it has other dependents.
3743 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3744 continue;
3745
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003746 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003747 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3748 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3749 continue;
3750
3751 bool isTrivial = true;
3752
3753 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3754 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3755 while (++I != E)
3756 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3757 isTrivial = false;
3758 break;
3759 }
3760
3761 if (isTrivial)
3762 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3763 }
3764
3765 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003766 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3767 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003768
3769 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3770 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3771 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3772 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3773 // to remove them all.
3774 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3775 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3776
3777 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3778 PI != PE;) {
3779 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3780 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3781 }
3782
3783 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3784 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3785 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3786 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3787 // predecessors.
3788 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3789 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3790 }
3791
3792 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3793 if (pred_empty(BB))
3794 BB->eraseFromParent();
3795
3796 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3797}
3798
3799// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3800bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003801 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3802 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003803 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3804 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003805
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003806 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3807 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003808 while (++I != E)
3809 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3810 return false;
3811
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003812 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003813 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3814 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3815 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003816 }
3817
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003818 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3819 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003820 if (LoopHeaders)
3821 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003822 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003823}
3824
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003825static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003826 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3827 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3828 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3829 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3830 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3831 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3832 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3833 // simplified.
3834 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003835 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3836 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003837 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3838 return false;
3839
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003840 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3841 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3842 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3843 return false;
3844
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003845 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003846 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003847 while (++I != E) {
3848 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3849 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003850 return false;
3851
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003852 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3853 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3854 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3855 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3856 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3857 break;
3858 default:
3859 return false;
3860 }
3861 }
3862
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003863 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3864 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003865 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003866 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003867
3868 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3869 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3870 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3871 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3872 // are both EH pads).
3873 if (UnwindDest) {
3874 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3875 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003876 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003877 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003878 I != IE; ++I) {
3879 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003880
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003881 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003882 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003883 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003884 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3885 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3886 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3887 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3888 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3889 // pad being removed.
3890 //
3891 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3892 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3893 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3894 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3895 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3896 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3897
3898 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3899 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3900
3901 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3902 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3903 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3904 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003905 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003906 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003907 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3908 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3909 }
3910 } else {
3911 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3912 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3913 // predecessors with this value.
3914 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3915 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3916 }
3917 }
3918 }
3919
3920 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003921 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003922 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3923 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003924 I != IE;) {
3925 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3926 // being moved to another block.
3927 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3928 if (PN->use_empty())
3929 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3930 // when we erase BB below.
3931 continue;
3932
3933 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3934 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3935 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3936 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3937 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3938 if (pred != BB)
3939 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3940 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3941 }
3942 }
3943
3944 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3945 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3946 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003947 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003948 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003949 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003950 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003951 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003952 }
3953 }
3954
3955 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3956 BB->eraseFromParent();
3957 return true;
3958}
3959
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003960// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3961static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3962 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3963 // with.
3964 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3965 if (!UnwindDest)
3966 return false;
3967
3968 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3969 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3970 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3971 return false;
3972
3973 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3974 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3975 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3976 return false;
3977
3978 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3979 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3980 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3981 // funclet bundle operands.
3982 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3983 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3984 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3985 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3986 // destination.
3987 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3988 RI->eraseFromParent();
3989
3990 return true;
3991}
3992
3993bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003994 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3995 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3996 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3997 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3998 return false;
3999
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004000 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004001 return true;
4002
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004003 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004004 return true;
4005
4006 return false;
4007}
4008
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004009bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004010 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004011 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4012 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004013
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004014 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004015 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4016 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004017 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4018 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004019 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4020 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4021 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4022 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4023 else
4024 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4025 }
4026 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004027
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004028 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004029 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004030 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4031 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4032 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004033 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004034 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004035 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004036
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004037 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004038 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004039 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4040 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004041 if (LoopHeaders)
4042 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004043 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004044
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004045 return true;
4046 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004047
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004048 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4049 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4050 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4051 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4052 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004053
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004054 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4055 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4056 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004057 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004058 return true;
4059 }
4060 return false;
4061}
4062
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004063bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4064 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004065
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004066 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004067
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004068 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4069 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004070 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4071 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004072 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004073 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4074 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4075 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004076 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4077 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004078
4079 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004080 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004081 if (SI->isVolatile())
4082 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004083 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004084 if (LI->isVolatile())
4085 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004086 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004087 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4088 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004089 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004090 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4091 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004092 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4093 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4094 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4095 // default.
4096 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4097 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4098 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4099 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004100 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4101 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004102 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004103 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004104 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4105 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4106 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4107 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004108 }
4109
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004110 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4111 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4112 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004113 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004114 Changed = true;
4115 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004116
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004117 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4118 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004119 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4120 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004121
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004122 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004123 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4124 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004125 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004126 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004127 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4128 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4129 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4130 TI->eraseFromParent();
4131 Changed = true;
4132 }
4133 } else {
4134 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004135 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004136 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4137 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004138 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004139 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4140 Changed = true;
4141 }
4142 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004143 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004144 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
4145 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004146 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004147 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4148 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004149 --i;
4150 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004151 Changed = true;
4152 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004153 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4154 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4155 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4156 Changed = true;
4157 }
4158 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4159 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4160 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4161 Changed = true;
4162 continue;
4163 }
4164
4165 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4166 E = CSI->handler_end();
4167 I != E; ++I) {
4168 if (*I == BB) {
4169 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4170 --I;
4171 --E;
4172 Changed = true;
4173 }
4174 }
4175 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4176 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4177 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4178 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4179 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4180 } else {
4181 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4182 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4183 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4184 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4185 }
4186 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4187 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4188 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4189 Changed = true;
4190 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004191 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004192 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4193 TI->eraseFromParent();
4194 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004195 }
4196 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004197
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004198 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004199 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004200 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4201 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004202 if (LoopHeaders)
4203 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004204 return true;
4205 }
4206
4207 return Changed;
4208}
4209
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004210static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4211 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4212
4213 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4214 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4215 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4216 return false;
4217 }
4218 return true;
4219}
4220
4221/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4222/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004223static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004224 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004225
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004226 bool HasDefault =
4227 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004228
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004229 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4230 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4231 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004232 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4233 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004234
4235 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4236 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004237 if (!DestA)
4238 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004239 if (Dest == DestA) {
4240 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4241 continue;
4242 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004243 if (!DestB)
4244 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004245 if (Dest == DestB) {
4246 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4247 continue;
4248 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004249 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004250 }
4251
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004252 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4253 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004254 assert(DestA != DestB);
4255 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4256 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4257 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4258
4259 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4260 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4261 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4262 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4263 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4264 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4265 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4266 OtherDest = DestB;
4267 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4268 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4269 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4270 OtherDest = DestA;
4271 } else
4272 return false;
4273
4274 // Start building the compare and branch.
4275
4276 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004277 Constant *NumCases =
4278 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004279
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004280 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4281 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004282 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4283
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004284 Value *Cmp;
4285 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004286 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004287 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4288 else
4289 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004290 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004291
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004292 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004293 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4294 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004295 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4296 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004297 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4298 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4299 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4300 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4301 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4302 else
4303 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4304 }
4305 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4306 TrueWeight /= 2;
4307 FalseWeight /= 2;
4308 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004309 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004310 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4311 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4312 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004313 }
4314 }
4315
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004316 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4317 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4318 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004319 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4320 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004321 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004322 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4323 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004324 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4325 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004326 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4327 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004328 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4329 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4330 }
4331
4332 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004333 SI->eraseFromParent();
4334
4335 return true;
4336}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004337
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004338/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004339/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004340static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4341 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004342 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004343 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004344 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004345 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004346
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004347 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4348 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4349 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004350 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004351 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4352
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004353 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004354 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004355 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004356 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4357 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4358 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004359 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004360 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004361 }
4362 }
4363
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004364 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4365 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004366 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4367 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004368 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004369 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4370 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4371 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004372 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004373 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004374 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004375 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004376 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004377 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4378 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004379 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4380 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004381 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4382 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4383 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4384 return true;
4385 }
4386
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004387 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4388 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4389 if (HasWeight) {
4390 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4391 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4392 }
4393
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004394 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004395 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4396 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004397 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004398 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004399 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004400 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004401 Weights.pop_back();
4402 }
4403
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004404 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004405 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004406 SI->removeCase(Case);
4407 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004408 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004409 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4410 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004411 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4412 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004413 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004414
4415 return !DeadCases.empty();
4416}
4417
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004418/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4419/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004420/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4421/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4422/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4423static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004424 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004425 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004426 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004427 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004428 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004429
4430 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4431 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004432 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004433
4434 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4435
4436 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4437 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4438 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4439 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4440
4441 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004442 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4443 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004444
4445 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4446 return PHI;
4447 }
4448
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004449 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004450}
4451
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004452/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4453/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4454/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004455/// Returns true if a change is made.
4456static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004457 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004458 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4459
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004460 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4461 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004462 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4463 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004464
4465 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004466 PHINode *PHI =
4467 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4468 if (!PHI)
4469 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004470
4471 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4472 }
4473
4474 bool Changed = false;
4475
4476 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004477 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4478 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004479 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004480 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004481
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004482 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4483 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004484
4485 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4486 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4487 Changed = true;
4488 }
4489
4490 return Changed;
4491}
4492
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004493/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004494/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004495static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004496 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4497 return false;
4498 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4499 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004500
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004501 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4502 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4503 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4504 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004505
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004506 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004507 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4508 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004509 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4510 return false;
4511 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004512
4513 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4514 return false;
4515
4516 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004517}
4518
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004519/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004520/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004521static Constant *
4522LookupConstant(Value *V,
4523 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004524 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4525 return C;
4526 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4527}
4528
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004529/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004530/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4531/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004532/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004533static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004534ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4535 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004536 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004537 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4538 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004539 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004540 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4541 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4542 if (A->isNullValue())
4543 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004544 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004545 }
4546
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004547 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4548 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4549 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4550 COps.push_back(A);
4551 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004552 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004553 }
4554
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004555 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004556 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4557 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004558 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004559
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004560 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004561}
4562
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004563/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004564/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004565/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004566/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004567static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004568GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004569 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004570 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004571 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004572 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4573 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4574
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004575 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4576 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004577 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004578 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4579 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4580 ++I) {
4581 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4582 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004583 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004584 return false;
4585 Pred = CaseDest;
4586 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4587 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4588 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4589 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004590 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004591 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004592
4593 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4594 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4595 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4596 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4597 User *User = Use.getUser();
4598 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4599 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4600 continue;
4601 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4602 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4603 continue;
4604 return false;
4605 }
4606
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004607 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004608 } else {
4609 break;
4610 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004611 }
4612
4613 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4614 if (!*CommonDest)
4615 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4616 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4617 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4618 return false;
4619
4620 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4621 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4622 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4623 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4624 if (Idx == -1)
4625 continue;
4626
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004627 Constant *ConstVal =
4628 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004629 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004630 return false;
4631
4632 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004633 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004634 return false;
4635
4636 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4637 }
4638
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004639 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004640}
4641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004642// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4643// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004644static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004645 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4646 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004647 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4648 if (I.first == Result) {
4649 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4650 return;
4651 }
4652 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004653 UniqueResults.push_back(
4654 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004655}
4656
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004657// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004658// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4659// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4660// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004661static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4662 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4663 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4664 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004665 const DataLayout &DL,
4666 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004667 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4668 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4669
4670 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4671 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4672 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004673 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004674 return false;
4675
4676 // Only one value per case is permitted
4677 if (Results.size() > 1)
4678 return false;
4679 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4680
4681 // Check the PHI consistency.
4682 if (!PHI)
4683 PHI = Results[0].first;
4684 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4685 return false;
4686 }
4687 // Find the default result value.
4688 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4689 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4690 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004691 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004692 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4693 // is unreachable.
4694 DefaultResult =
4695 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4696 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004697 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004698 return false;
4699
4700 return true;
4701}
4702
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004703// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4704// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004705// Example:
4706// switch (a) {
4707// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4708// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4709// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4710// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4711// default:
4712// return 4;
4713// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004714static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4715 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4716 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004717 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004718 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004719 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4720 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4721 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4722 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4723 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4724 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4725
4726 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4727 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4728 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4729 Value *const ValueCompare =
4730 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4731 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4732 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4733 }
4734 Value *const ValueCompare =
4735 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004736 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4737 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004738 }
4739
4740 return nullptr;
4741}
4742
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004743// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4744// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004745static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4746 Value *SelectValue,
4747 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4748 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4749 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4750 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4751 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4752
4753 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4754
4755 // Remove the switch.
4756 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4757 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4758
4759 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4760 continue;
4761 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4762 }
4763 SI->eraseFromParent();
4764}
4765
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004766/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004767/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4768/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4769static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004770 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004771 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004772 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4773 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4774 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4775 Constant *DefaultResult;
4776 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4777 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004778 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004779 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004780 return false;
4781 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4782 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4783 return false;
4784 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4785
4786 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004787 Value *SelectValue =
4788 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004789 if (SelectValue) {
4790 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4791 return true;
4792 }
4793 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4794 return false;
4795}
4796
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004797namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004798
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004799/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4800class SwitchLookupTable {
4801public:
4802 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4803 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4804 SwitchLookupTable(
4805 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4806 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4807 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004808
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004809 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4810 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4811 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004812
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004813 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4814 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4815 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4816 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004817
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004818private:
4819 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4820 // different ways.
4821 enum {
4822 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4823 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4824 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004825
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004826 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4827 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4828 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4829 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004830
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004831 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4832 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4833 // shift and mask operations.
4834 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004835
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004836 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4837 // instructions from the table.
4838 ArrayKind
4839 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004840
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004841 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4842 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004843
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004844 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4845 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4846 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004847
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004848 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4849 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4850 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004851
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004852 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4853 GlobalVariable *Array;
4854};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004855
4856} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004857
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004858SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4859 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4860 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4861 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004862 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004863 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004864 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4865 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004866
4867 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004868 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004869
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004870 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4871
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004872 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004873 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004874 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4875 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4876 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004877 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004878
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004879 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004880 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4881
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004882 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004883 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004884 }
4885
4886 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004887 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004888 assert(DefaultValue &&
4889 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004890 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004891 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4892 if (!TableContents[I])
4893 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004894 }
4895
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004896 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004897 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004898 }
4899
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004900 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4901 // that single value.
4902 if (SingleValue) {
4903 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4904 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004905 }
4906
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004907 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4908 // table index.
4909 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4910 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4911 APInt PrevVal;
4912 APInt DistToPrev;
4913 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4914 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4915 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4916 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4917 if (!ConstVal) {
4918 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4919 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4920 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4921 break;
4922 }
4923 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4924 if (I != 0) {
4925 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4926 if (I == 1) {
4927 DistToPrev = Dist;
4928 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4929 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4930 break;
4931 }
4932 }
4933 PrevVal = Val;
4934 }
4935 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4936 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4937 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4938 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4939 ++NumLinearMaps;
4940 return;
4941 }
4942 }
4943
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004944 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004945 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004946 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004947 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4948 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4949 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004950 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4951 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4952 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4953 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4954 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004955 }
4956 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4957 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4958 Kind = BitMapKind;
4959 ++NumBitMaps;
4960 return;
4961 }
4962
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004963 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004964 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004965 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4966
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004967 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4968 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004969 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004970 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004971 Kind = ArrayKind;
4972}
4973
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004974Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004975 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004976 case SingleValueKind:
4977 return SingleValue;
4978 case LinearMapKind: {
4979 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4980 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4981 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4982 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4983 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4984 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4985 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4986 return Result;
4987 }
4988 case BitMapKind: {
4989 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4990 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004991
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004992 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4993 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4994 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4995 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004996
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004997 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4998 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4999 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5000 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005001
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005002 // Shift down.
5003 Value *DownShifted =
5004 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5005 // Mask off.
5006 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5007 }
5008 case ArrayKind: {
5009 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5010 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5011 uint64_t TableSize =
5012 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5013 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5014 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5015 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5016 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005017
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005018 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5019 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5020 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5021 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5022 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005023 }
5024 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5025}
5026
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005027bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005028 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005029 Type *ElementType) {
5030 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005031 if (!IT)
5032 return false;
5033 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5034 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005035
5036 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005037 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005038 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005039 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005040}
5041
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005042/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5043/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005044static bool
5045ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5046 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5047 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005048 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5049 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005050
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005051 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005052 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005053 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5054 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005055
5056 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005057 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005058
5059 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005060 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5061 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5062 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005063
5064 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5065 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5066 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5067 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005068 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005069 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005070
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005071 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5072 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5073 return true;
5074
5075 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5076 if (HasIllegalType)
5077 return false;
5078
5079 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5080 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5081 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5082 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005083}
5084
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005085/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5086/// \code
5087/// if (idx < tablesize)
5088/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5089/// else
5090/// r = default_value;
5091/// if (r != default_value)
5092/// ...
5093/// \endcode
5094/// Is optimized to:
5095/// \code
5096/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5097/// if (cond)
5098/// r = table[idx];
5099/// else
5100/// r = default_value;
5101/// if (cond)
5102/// ...
5103/// \endcode
5104/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005105static void reuseTableCompare(
5106 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5107 Constant *DefaultValue,
5108 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005109
5110 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5111 if (!CmpInst)
5112 return;
5113
5114 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5115 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5116 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5117 return;
5118
5119 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5120 if (!CmpOp1)
5121 return;
5122
5123 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5124 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5125 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5126
5127 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5128 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5129 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5130 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5131 return;
5132
5133 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5134 // compare result.
5135 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5136 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005137 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005138 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5139 return;
5140 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5141 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5142 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005143
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005144 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5145 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5146 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5147 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5148 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5149 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5150 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5151 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5152 return;
5153 }
5154
5155 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5156 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5157 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5158 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5159 } else {
5160 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005161 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5162 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5163 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005164 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5165 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5166 }
5167}
5168
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005169/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5170/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5171/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005172static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5173 const DataLayout &DL,
5174 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005175 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005176
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005177 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005178 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005179 return false;
5180
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005181 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5182 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5183
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005184 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5185 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5186 // string and lookup indices into that.
5187
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005188 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5189 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005190 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5191 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005192 return false;
5193
5194 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005195 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005196 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5197 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5198 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5199 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5200
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005201 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005202 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5203 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5204 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5205 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5206 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005207
5208 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5209 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5210 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5211 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5212 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5213 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5214
5215 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005216 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005217 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00005218 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005219 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005220 return false;
5221
5222 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005223 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5224 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5225 Constant *Value = I.second;
5226 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5227 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5228 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005229 }
5230 }
5231
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005232 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005233 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005234 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5235 }
5236
5237 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5238 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5239 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5240 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5241
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005242 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5243 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005244 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005245 bool HasDefaultResults =
5246 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5247 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005248
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005249 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5250 if (NeedMask) {
5251 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005252 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005253 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005254 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005255 return false;
5256 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005257
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005258 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5259 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5260 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005261 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005262 }
5263
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005264 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005265 return false;
5266
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005267 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005268 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005269 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5270 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005271
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005272 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005273 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005274 Value *TableIndex =
5275 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005276
5277 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5278 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005279 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005280 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005281 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5282 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5283 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5284
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005285 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5286 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5287 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5288 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5289 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5290 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005291 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5292
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005293 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005294 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005295 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5296 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005297 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005298 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5299 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5300 RangeCheckBranch =
5301 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005302 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005303
5304 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5305 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005306
5307 if (NeedMask) {
5308 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5309 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5310 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5311 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5312 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005313 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5314 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005315
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005316 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5317 // unnecessary illegal types.
5318 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5319 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5320 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005321 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005322 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5323 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005324 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5325 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005326 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5327 }
5328 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5329
5330 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5331 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5332 // else continue with table lookup.
5333 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005334 Value *MaskIndex =
5335 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5336 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5337 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5338 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005339 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5340
5341 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5342 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5343 }
5344
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005345 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5346 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5347 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5348 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5349 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5350 }
5351
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005352 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005353 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5354 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005355 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005356
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005357 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5358 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005359 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005360
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005361 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005362
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005363 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5364 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005365 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5366 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005367 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5368 ReturnedEarly = true;
5369 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005370 }
5371
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005372 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5373 // possible.
5374 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5375 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5376 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5377 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5378 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5379 }
5380 }
5381
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005382 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005383 }
5384
5385 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5386 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5387
5388 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005389 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005390 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005391
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005392 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005393 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005394 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5395 }
5396 SI->eraseFromParent();
5397
5398 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005399 if (NeedMask)
5400 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005401 return true;
5402}
5403
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005404static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5405 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5406 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5407 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5408 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5409 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5410 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005411
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005412 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5413}
5414
5415// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5416// of cases.
5417//
5418// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5419// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5420//
5421// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5422// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5423static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5424 const DataLayout &DL,
5425 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5426 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5427 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5428 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5429 return false;
5430 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5431 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5432 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5433 return false;
5434
5435 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5436 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5437 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5438 // as signed.
5439 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5440 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5441 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5442 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5443
5444 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5445 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5446 return false;
5447
5448 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5449 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5450 for (auto &V : Values)
5451 V -= Base;
5452
5453 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5454 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5455 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5456 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5457 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005458 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005459
5460 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5461 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5462 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5463 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5464 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5465 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5466 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5467 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005468 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005469 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5470 return false;
5471
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005472 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005473 for (auto &V : Values)
5474 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5475
5476 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5477 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5478 return false;
5479
5480 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5481 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5482 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5483 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5484 //
5485 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5486 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5487 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5488 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005489
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005490 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5491 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5492 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5493 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005494 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5495 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5496 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005497 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5498
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005499 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5500 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005501 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5502 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005503 C.setValue(
5504 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005505 }
5506 return true;
5507}
5508
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005509bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005510 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5511
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005512 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5513 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5514 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5515 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5516 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005517 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005518
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005519 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5520 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5521 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005522 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005523
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005524 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5525 // away into any preds.
5526 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5527 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5528 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5529 ++BBI;
5530 if (SI == &*BBI)
5531 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005532 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005533 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005534
5535 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005536 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005537 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005538
5539 // Remove unreachable cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005540 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5541 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005542
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005543 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL, TTI))
5544 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005545
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005546 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005547 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005548
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005549 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005550 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005551
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005552 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005553 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005554
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005555 return false;
5556}
5557
5558bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5559 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5560 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005561
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005562 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5563 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5564 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5565 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005566 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005567 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5568 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005569 --i;
5570 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005571 Changed = true;
5572 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005573 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005574
5575 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5576 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5577 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5578 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5579 return true;
5580 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005581
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005582 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5583 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5584 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5585 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5586 return true;
5587 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005588
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005589 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5590 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005591 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005592 }
5593 return Changed;
5594}
5595
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005596/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5597/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5598/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5599/// a shared handler.
5600///
5601/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5602/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5603/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5604/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5605/// sinking in this file)
5606///
5607/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5608/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5609/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5610/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5611/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5612/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5613///
5614/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5615/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5616/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5617static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5618 BasicBlock *BB) {
5619 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5620 assert(Succ);
5621 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5622 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5623 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5624 return false;
5625
5626 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5627 if (BB == OtherPred)
5628 continue;
5629 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5630 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5631 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5632 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005633 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5634 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005635 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5636 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5637 continue;
5638
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005639 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005640 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5641 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5642 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5643 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5644 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005645 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5646 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005647 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5648 }
5649
5650 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5651 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005652 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5653 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5654 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005655 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5656 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5657 }
5658
5659 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5660 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5661 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5662 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5663 }
5664
5665 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5666 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5667 BI->eraseFromParent();
5668 return true;
5669 }
5670 return false;
5671}
5672
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005673bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5674 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005675 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005676
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005677 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5678 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005679
5680 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5681 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005682 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5683 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5684 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5685 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005686 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005687 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005688 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005689 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5690 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005691
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005692 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5693 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5694 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5695 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5696 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5697 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005698 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005699 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005700 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005701 return true;
5702 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005703
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005704 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5705 // equivalent.
5706 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005707 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5708 }
5709 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005710 return true;
5711 }
5712
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005713 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5714 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5715 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5716 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005717 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005718 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005719 return false;
5720}
5721
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005722static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5723 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5724 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5725 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5726 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5727 return nullptr;
5728 PredPred = PPred;
5729 }
5730 return PredPred;
5731}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005732
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005733bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005734 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005735
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005736 // Conditional branch
5737 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5738 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5739 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5740 // switch.
5741 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005742 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005743 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005744
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005745 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5746 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5747 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5748 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5749 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5750 ++I;
5751 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005752 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005753 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005754 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005755 ++I;
5756 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5757 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5758 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005759 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005760 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005761 }
5762 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005763
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005764 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005765 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005766 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005767
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005768 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5769 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5770 // of the BI branch.
5771 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5772 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5773 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5774 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5775 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5776 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5777 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5778 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5779 if (Implication) {
5780 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5781 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5782 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5783 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5784 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5785 BI->setCondition(CI);
5786 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005787 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005788 }
5789 }
5790 }
5791
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005792 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5793 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5794 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005795 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005796 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005797
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005798 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5799 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5800 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5801 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005802 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5803 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005804 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005805 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005806 } else {
5807 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005808 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005809 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5810 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5811 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005812 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005813 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005814 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005815 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005816 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005817 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005818 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5819 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5820 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005821 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005822 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005823 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005824
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005825 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5826 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5827 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5828 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005829 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005830 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005831
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005832 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005833 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5834 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005835 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005836 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005837 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005838
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005839 // Look for diamond patterns.
5840 if (MergeCondStores)
5841 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5842 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5843 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5844 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005845 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005846
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005847 return false;
5848}
5849
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005850/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5851static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5852 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5853 if (!C)
5854 return false;
5855
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005856 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005857 return false;
5858
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005859 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005860 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005861 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005862
5863 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5864 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005865 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5866 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5867 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5868 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005869 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005870 return false;
5871
5872 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5873 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5874 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5875 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5876
5877 // Look through bitcasts.
5878 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5879 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5880
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005881 // Load from null is undefined.
5882 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005883 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5884 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005885
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005886 // Store to null is undefined.
5887 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005888 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005889 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5890 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005891
5892 // A call to null is undefined.
5893 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5894 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005895 }
5896 return false;
5897}
5898
5899/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005900/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005901static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5902 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5903 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5904 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5905 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5906 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5907 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5908 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5909 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5910 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5911 // destination from conditional branches.
5912 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5913 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5914 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005915 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5916 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005917 BI->eraseFromParent();
5918 return true;
5919 }
5920 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5921 }
5922
5923 return false;
5924}
5925
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005926bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005927 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005928
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005929 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005930 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005931
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005932 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5933 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005934 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005935 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005936 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5937 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5938 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005939 }
5940
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005941 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5942 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005943 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005944
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005945 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5946 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5947
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005948 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5949 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5950
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005951 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5952 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5953 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5954 //
5955 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5956 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005957
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005958 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5959
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005960 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5961 // eliminate it, do so now.
5962 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5963 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005964 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005965
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005966 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005967 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005968 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005969 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5970 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005971 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005972 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5973 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005974 }
5975 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005976 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5977 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005978 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005979 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5980 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005981 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005982 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5983 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5984 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005985 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005986 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5987 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005988 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005989 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5990 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5991 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005992 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005993 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5994 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5995 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005996 }
5997
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005998 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005999}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006000
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00006001/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
6002/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006003/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
6004/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
6005///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00006006bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006007 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00006008 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006009 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006010 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006011 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006012}